2016 Chrysler 300 Owner`s Manual - Dealer E

2016 Chrysler 300 Owner`s Manual - Dealer E
300
2016
OWNER’S MANUAL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanyour satisfaction.
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
VIN Location
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartDisclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment.
vehicle registration, and the title.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . .
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. . . . . .19
. . . . . .19
. . . . . .20
. . . . . .20
. . . . . .21
. . . . . .21
. . . . . .21
. . . . . .22
. . . . . .23
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .25
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF
䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . .
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . .
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . .
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . .
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. . . . . . . .46
. . . . . . . .46
. . . . . . . .47
. . . . . . . .47
. . . . . . . .48
. . . . . . . .61
. . . . . . . .77
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .99
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Keyless Push Button Ignition
Key Fob against the engine START/STOP button and
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with push to operate the ignition.
the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
WARNING!
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the
chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display
in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition
and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition
node is in “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from
the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
CAUTION!
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition in the
OFF position and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
it indicates that someone tried to use an invalid Key Fob
to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorthe engine being shut off after two seconds.
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
or unlocked.
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
possible by an authorized dealer.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Push Button
Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized
CAUTION!
vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and • Do not make modifications or alterations to the
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
to crank with an invalid Key Fob.
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
SENTRY KEY
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the system. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
security protection.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have NOTE: Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank
Replacement Keys
Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System servehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
viced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
dealer.
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
Customer Key Programming
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
General Information
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and START/STOP button for unauthorized operation. While
the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
door locks and trunk release are disabled. If something
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
2. This device must accept any interference received, will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
including interference that may cause undesired opwill flash.
eration.
Rearming Of The System
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8
cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
3. If any doors are open, close them.
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
To Disarm The System
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is placed in the “OFF” The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting the following methods:
And Operating⬙ for further information).
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
• Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle: • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if
equipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
information.
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the • Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go START/STOP button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in
⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information).
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security System Manual Override
Security Alarm.
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior doors using the manual door lock plunger.
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
Tamper Alert
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery doors or open any door.
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitplaced in the ON/RUN position from the OFF position. ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Unlock The Doors
Flash Lights With Lock
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Headlight Illumination On Approach
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either equipped through Uconnect. To change the current setthe driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the ting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
Sound Horn With Lock
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
(24 km/h) or greater.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE:
Transmitter Battery Replacement
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic battery.
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and NOTE:
horn will remain on.
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
Separating The RKE Transmitter Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
Emergency Key Removal
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveGeneral Information
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and NOTE:
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and • Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
may reduce this range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Vehicle Security Alarm not active
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the • Ignition in OFF position
engine will remote start:
WARNING!
• Vehicle in PARK
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Trunk closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE panic button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Remote Start Abort Message
To Enter Remote Start Mode
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
NOTE:
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster message stays active until the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, push and release the START/STOP button.
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enteryou can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
N-Go feature, the message “Remote start active - Push
start button” will display in the Instrument Cluster
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Display until you push the START button.
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or Cancel Remote Start
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system occur:
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
• Any engine warning lights come on.
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
• Low Fuel Light turns on.
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the • The hood is opened.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if • The hazard switch is pushed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
General Information
DOOR LOCKS
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Manual Door Locks
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and upward.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Door Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the
door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and
the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 MPH (24 km/h).
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by
your authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to
0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission is placed in
PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
2
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower reraise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
sponse time.
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to (1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry. NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
search in any passive entry vehicle.
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
transmitter while a door is open.
• The doors are locked manually using the door lock
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
knobs.
handle while a door is open.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
the door is open.
Entry door handle.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
door panel switch and then close the doors.
finds a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car and
it does not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters To Enter The Trunk
outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert the
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
customer.
(1.0 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the right side
of CHMSL (Center High Mounted Stop Light), which is
located on the deck lid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
deck lid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door NOTE:
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
General Information
WINDOWS
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio Power Windows
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and door windows.
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Power Window Switches
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in AUTO-Down Feature
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inThe driver door power window switch and some model
formation.
passenger door power window switches have an AUTOdown feature. Push the window switch to the second
WARNING!
detent, release, and the window will go down automatiNever leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do cally.
not let children play with power windows. Do not To open the window part way, push the window switch
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a to the first detent and release it when you want the
location accessible to children, and do not leave the window to stop.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
To stop the window from going all the way down during • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autothe AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
closure. If this happens, pull and hold the switch to
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
close the window manually.
Equipped
Pull window up switch for at least a half of a second and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window during an auto-up operation, push
or pull the window switch again.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
To close the window part way, pull and hold the window
Reset Auto-Up
switch briefly and release it when you want the window
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
to stop.
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
NOTE:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back 2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
switch again to close the window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors and the rear sunscreen (if
equipped). To disable the window controls and the rear
sunscreen, push and release the window lockout button
(setting it in the DOWN position). To enable the window
controls and the rear sunscreen, push and release the
window lockout button again (setting it in the UP
position).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Window Lockout Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
2
Trunk Release
Button
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pushing the
TRUNK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
twice within five seconds or by
using the external release switch
located on the underside of the
decklid overhang. The release feature will function only when the
vehicle is in the unlock condition.
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
pushing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open Trunk Emergency Release
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information on event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
Some of the most important safety features in your
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
vehicle are the restraint systems:
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
• Seat Belt Systems
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
• Child Restraints
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chilImportant Safety Precautions
dren who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
Please pay close attention to the information in this
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
possible.
them or under their arm.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the 5. You should read the instructions provided with your
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
Seat Belt Systems
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
be belted at all times.
active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccuDriver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
pied.
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when- vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unposition.
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
Initial Indication
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermit- has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
tent chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authobelts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu- rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
pants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
the latch plate.
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
shoulder belt.
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
anchor point.
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
best.
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
2
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
worn snugly and positioned properly.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag System Components
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
Advanced Front Air Bags
system components:
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
• Air Bag Warning Light
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
• Steering Wheel and Column
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
• Instrument Panel
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
• Knee Impact Bolsters
the air bag covers.
• Advanced Front Air Bags
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
WARNING!
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
severe initial deceleration.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Knee Impact Bolsters
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
2
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
Label Location
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
“AIRBAG.”
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
WARNING!
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
Rollover Events
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a
near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
immediately after deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
the air bag system.
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
or all of the following may occur:
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
structions for cleaning.
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- Enhanced Accident Response System
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air In the event of an impact, if the communication network
bags will not be in place to protect you.
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
WARNING!
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response SysDeployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot tem perform the following functions:
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with air bag
system electrical components.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfuncthe air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
remains on while driving.
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected,
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
which could affect the Supplemental Restraint
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air Bag WarnController (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
ing Light will illuminate on the instrument
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protecpanel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
system immediately.
chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of
this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
These data can help provide a better understanding of
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to are recorded. However, other parties, such as law envehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
is designed to record such data as:
crash investigation.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
were buckled/fastened;
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the ment, can read the information if they have access to the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
vehicle or the EDR.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Child Restraints
WARNING!
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are different sizes and types of restraints for NOTE:
children from newborn size to the child almost large
• For
additional
information,
refer
to
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-732-8243.
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafetyrestraint.
index-53.htm
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system
weight + weight of the child reuntil the combined weight of the
straint) for using the LATCH anchild and the child restraint is
chorage system to attach the child
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
restraint?
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
No
Do not use the seat belt when you
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
use the LATCH anchorage system
attach a rear-facing or forwardto attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint?
facing child restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be atNo
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
tached using a common lower
with two or more child restraints.
LATCH anchorage?
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
The child seat may touch the back
touch the back of the front passenof the front passenger seat if the
ger seat?
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be reYes
Center position only may be removed?
moved.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
2
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end Always follow the directions of the child restraint
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
in any direction.
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
ing position.
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
turer’s instructions.
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
them.
Belt
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
2
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child reusing the seat belt to install a forstraint) for using the Tether Anchor
ward facing child restraint, up to
with the seat belt to attach a forthe recommended weight limit of
ward facing child restraint?
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passentouch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
ger seat?
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be reYes
Center Only may be removed.
moved?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
tighten the seat belt against the belt
seating position with an ALR repath of the child restraint?
tractor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
“click.”
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
Tether Strap Mounting
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head 1 — Cover
A — Tether Strap Hook
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, 3 — Attaching Strap
B — Tether Anchor
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child 2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head
restraint.
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Center Tether Attachment
1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full
down position.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the center tether anchorage located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
CAUTION!
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
not interpreted as a problem.
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- SAFETY TIPS
mental and should be avoided.
Transporting Passengers
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate AREA.
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
system.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
system.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, Air Bag Warning Light
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault
is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .112
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .122
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . .120
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .153
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .140
▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .146
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL). . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .159
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
䡵 MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .161 䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .164
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. . . . . .171
. . . . . .172
. . . . . .174
. . . . . .175
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .186
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .193
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .181
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .182
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .194
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .197
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .208
▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . .226
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .227
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .210 䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .232
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .234
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .235
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .245
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . .245
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . .245
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .239
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .245
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .246
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
䡵 COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .247
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Trunk Mat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Grocery Bag Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . .258
▫ Power Sunshade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .263
Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned a 9-1-1 button.
on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
ASSIST Call
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the Assist button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
features.
you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
vehicle issues.
and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
operator:
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
• The vehicle brand.
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
9-1-1 Call
Rearview Mirror or push the cancellation button on the
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
additional help is needed.
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
operator may be able to open a voice connection with
the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
WARNING! (Continued)
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working
properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to
send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the ORC system immediately.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors • Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network congesbeyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
tion.
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Weather.
General Information
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call.
Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS
signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to
function properly.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimlane next to your vehicle.
ming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight
glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
NOTE: This feature is also available on the passenger’s
side when equipped with turn signal and approach
lighting.
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are
located in the upper outer corner of each mirror.
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full flashers will also activate these LEDs.
forward, full rearward and normal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting,
which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This
LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door
handles. It also shines downward to illuminate the area
in front of the doors.
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30
seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
ignition is placed into the RUN position.
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Ungear selector is moved out of the PARK position.
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informaTilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
tion.
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select butThe power mirror controls are located on the driver’s tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
door trim panel.
the mirror that you want to adjust.
Power Mirrors
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Control
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
to the normal driving position.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
will automatically unfold.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grab the sun visor and pull
rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position. To
use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the
extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull
rearward.
3
Slide-On-Rod Feature
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
BSM Warning Light
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Stationary Objects
Overtaking/Passing
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is
equipped with the BSM system, always check your
vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use
your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The
BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians,
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where the
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
Rear Cross Path (RCP) is not a Back Up Aid system.
It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an
oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and deUconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
tected object are present on the same side at the same
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrutime, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
ment Panel” for further information.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
be reduced.
Modes Of Operation
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
system, the radio volume is reduced.
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approthe RCP state always requests the chime.
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opWhen the BSM system is turned off there will be no
eration of the device.
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
systems.
other than an authorized service facility could void
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
authorization to use this equipment.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and SEATS
used.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
General Information
vehicle.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
WARNING!
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
Blind Spot Alert Off
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats
On models equipped with power seats, the switches are
located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor.
Use these switches to move the driver’s seat up or down,
forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.
1 — Seat Control
Power Seat Switches
2 — Seatback Control — If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
WARNING!
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to
increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar
support.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated
using the Uconnect System.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
Power Lumbar Switch
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting ON.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.
a third time to turn
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
Front Heated Seats
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after apThe front heated seats control buttons are located within proximately 45 minutes.
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
NOTE:
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
two to five minutes.
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
once to turn the HI
• Press the heated seat button
setting ON.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING! (Continued)
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Rear Heated Seats
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these
seats are located on the rear of the center console. There
that allow the rear
are two heated seat switches
passengers to operate the seats independently.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Push the heated seat button
heating.
once to select HI-level
• Push the heated seat button
LO-level heating.
a second time to select
• Push the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.
illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help
NOTE:
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
two to five minutes.
a third time to turn
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
operate.
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto- screen.
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minonce to choose HI.
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of • Press the ventilated seat button
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
a second time to
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
• Press the ventilated seat button
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
a third time to
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
Head Restraints
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the RHR.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
Adjustment Button
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then 1 — Release Button
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
2 — Adjustment Button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Rear Head Restraints
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with
the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.
The center head restraint has two adjustable positions, up
or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The head restraint should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If the center
rear head restraints requires removal, see your authorized dealer.
• The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
Adjustment Button
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
3
Rear Seatback Loop
Folded Rear Seatback
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pushed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters, one RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S)
button, which is used to activate the memory save
function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Place the ignition into the RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Driver Information
Display (DID) will display which memory position
has been set.
Memory Seat Switch
NOTE: Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set,
refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this
section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the 3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then push
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
cluster.
Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- 4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transformation.
mitter within 10 seconds.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow- NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
ing:
memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the Off position.
button on the RKE transmitter.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system
will recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for
the system to complete the memory recall before
continuing to Step 3.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Memory Position Recall
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
in PARK, a message will display in the DID (if equipped). vehicle.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, push The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
MEMORY button number (1) on the driver’s door or the you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
memory position 1.
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF
To recall the memory setting for driver two, push
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60
MEMORY button number (2) on the driver’s door or the
mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
memory position 2.
stop. The seat will return to its previously set position
when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
RUN position.
buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during a recall.
When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, adjustable • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steerdriver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
ing column (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit Two latches must be released to open the hood.
or Easy Entry.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
of the instrument panel.
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Hood Release Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Safety Latch
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in
the open position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off Automatic Headlights Only)
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic this feature.
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
position.
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
will come on in the automatic mode.
information.
Parking Lights
Headlight Time Delay
Turn the headlight switch knob to the first detent This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
to turn the parking lights on. This also turns on all for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
instrument panel lighting.
vehicle in an unlit area.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automatIf you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high
delay.
beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
of view.
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrufeature.
ment Panel” for further information.
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Unof vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforremain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
mation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera To Deactivate
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
If the windshield or forward facing camera module is
in vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
replaced, the camera must be re-calibrated to ensure
operation of low beams).
proper system performance. See your local authorized
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
dealer.
system.
To Activate
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight Headlights — If Equipped
position.
This system automatically swivels the headlight beam
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in
the direction the vehicle is steering.
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
• Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on,
be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
the headlights will initialize by performing a brief
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
sequence of rotations.
Panel” for further information.
• The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when
Lights-On Reminder
the vehicle is moving forward.
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when the
engine starts, headlights are off, and the parking brake is
off. The headlight switch must be used for normal
nighttime driving.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
headlight switch.
switch.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Driver
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
three times then automatically turn off.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Turn Signals
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
High/Low Beam Switch
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overthe headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever head console.
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Front Map/Reading Lights
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pushed.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Ambient Light — If Equipped
Interior Lights
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibilTo protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
ity of the floor and center console area.
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Ambient Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
equipped).
Dimmer Controls
Dimmer Controls
Instrument Panel Dimmer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Ambient Light Control
Dome Light Position
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights and ambient light located in the overhead console. lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom
“OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when
the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID),
and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Intermittent Wiper System
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Mist Feature
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
continue to operate until you release the multifunction
lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
the intermittent interval previously selected.
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
this feature.
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
WARNING!
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield information.
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of Rain Sensing Wipers
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
windshield with the defroster before and during automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
windshield washer use.
feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. The rain sense wipers will
automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow
wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of
moisture that is sensed on the windshield. Place the
wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the
system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when
ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
following conditions:
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in
formation.
the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN
position, the automatic transmission gear selector is in
the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less
than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the wiper control on the
multifunction lever is moved or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position,
rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
steering column switch is located below the multifuncupward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
tion lever on the steering column.
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section.
WARNING!
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Switch
To tilt the steering column, move the switch up or down
as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the switch toward you or push the switch away from
you as desired.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps steering wheel to operate.
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
130 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated
during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instruwhen the steering wheel is already warm.
ment Panel” for further information.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element ON.
once to
• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element OFF.
a second
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. If your vehicle is equipped with this
feature, it will allow you to adjust the brake and accelAdjustable Pedals Switch
erator pedals toward or away from the driver to provide
Push
the
switch
forward to move the pedals forward
improved position with the steering wheel.
(toward the front of the vehicle).
The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat
Push the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
cushion side shield.
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Driver Information Display (DID) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted
when the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal
Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A
CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “UnderA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control withspeed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition U.S. Speed (mph)
To Deactivate
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
the new set speed will be established.
To Vary The Speed Setting
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Increase Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inincrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
crease speed by pushing the SET + button.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
the new set speed will be established.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Accelerate For Passing
U.S. Speed (mph)
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on EQUIPPED
moderate hills is normal.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Control.
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
the mode selected.
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
Always confirm which mode is selected.
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
WARNING!
the vehicle ahead.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibilappropriate distance between vehicles.
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
conditions. Your complete attention is always reControl Mode” in this section.
quired while driving to maintain safe control of
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds
the ACC system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that the
brakes must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
3
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
— NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
— SET+/ACCEL
— RESUME
— SET-/DECEL
— DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
— ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
— DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
— CANCEL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive conditions:
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
• When you apply the brakes.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When the parking brake is set.
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE0 mph (0 km/h).
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the brakes are overheated.
the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC • When the driver door is open.
Ready.”
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive
To Activate/Deactivate
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays
“ACC Ready.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
3
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the DID will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID
will display the set speed.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the DID.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below To Cancel
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
The following conditions cancel the system:
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be • The brake pedal is applied.
the current speed of the vehicle.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- • The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The ignition is turned off.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
NOTE:
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
NOTE:
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle • If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
To Turn Off
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
distance setting displays in the DID.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
3
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
speed.
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer). • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
Brake Alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the DID is a warning for
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean
capacity.
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
U.S. Speed (mph)
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a ve- • Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
passing on the left hand side.
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
To Vary The Speed Setting
in the DID.
To Increase Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
in the DID.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
button is released. The decrease in set speed is respeed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
flected in the DID.
U.S. Speed (mph)
NOTE:
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph • When you override and push the SET + button or SET
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
of the vehicle.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
button is released. The decrease in set speed is resufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
flected in the DID.
will automatically slow the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two
seconds the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
ACC Operation At Stop
vention will be required at this moment.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting this moment.
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down- While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main- standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display
exceeds normal range (overheated).
on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver interIf the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
instrument cluster.
DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status. The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of • System Cancel
the following displays in the DID:
• Driver Override
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• System Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap• ACC Proximity Warning
tive Cruise Control Off.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• ACC Unavailable Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
five seconds of no ACC display activity
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
Display Warnings And Maintenance
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
this warning may temporarily occur.
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as section.
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/ examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
system will deactivate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- When the condition that deactivated the system is no
tant to note the following maintenance items:
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
simply reactivating it.
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
NOTE:
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so • If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
require a sensor realignment.
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
your authorized dealer.
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
market grille or modifying the grille is not recomincluding transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
ACC/FCW operation.
malfunction.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the DID will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW Service ACC/FCW Warning
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailany vehicles or objects in its path this warning may able Service Required”, there may be an internal system
temporarily occur.
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC funcIf weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should tionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
examine the windshield and the camera located on the normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
3
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume Using ACC On Hills
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
system functionality.
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example
Turn Or Bend Example
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
3
Lane Changing Example
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Narrow Vehicles
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
General Information
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Mode
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
eration of the device.
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
other than an authorized service facility could void
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONauthorization to use this equipment.
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set A Desired Speed
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Undercontinue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
in the DID display.
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
To Decrease Speed
U.S. Speed (mph)
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
in the DID display.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The brake pedal is applied.
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sysflected in the DID display.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the • The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
To Resume Speed
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reTo resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
flected in the DID display.
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
To Cancel
20 mph (32 km/h).
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
To Turn Off
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
memory if:
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
ON/OFF button is pushed.
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
• The ignition is turned off.
visual warnings (within the DID), and may apply a brake
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended
pushed.
to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. the brakes.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required. If a Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event begins at a speed below 20 mph
FCW Message
(32 km/h), the system may provide the maximum or
partial braking to mitigate the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle. vehicle in front of you.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If The forward collision button is located on the switch
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should panel below the Uconnect display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
off).
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
in front of you.
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
system from providing limited autonomous braking, or
avoid a possible collision.
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF,
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
return to its full performance state. If the problem perdriver after ignition shut down.
sists, see your authorized dealer.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
Service FCW Warning
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
higher rate of speed.
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
screens.
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
FCW Limited Warning
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If the DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality”
or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind- LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
shield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits LaneSense Operation
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
under normal conditions, the active braking may not be
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by The LaneSense button is located on the center stack
below the Uconnect display.
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
LaneSense button to turn the system ON (LED
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a turns off). A “Lane Sense On” message is shown in the
visual warning through the DID to prompt the driver to DID.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).
7.0 Driver Information Display (DID) Screen — If
Equipped
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
Left
Lane
Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
3
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Changing LaneSense Status
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
The LaneSense system settings can be configured • The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
through the Uconnect system screen.
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control,
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings:
forward collision warning, etc.)
1. Push the “Controls” button on touchscreen located on
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
the bottom of the Uconnect display.
IF EQUIPPED
2. Push the “Settings” button.
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
3. Push the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button.
audible indications of the distance between the rear
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
configure the intensity of the torque warning and the up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the person- Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
alization settings.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph changed to the ON/RUN position.
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47
inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer ParkSense Sensors
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is Instrument Panel” for further information.
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79
Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual
inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the deorientation of the obstacle.
tected obstacle. Refer to “Driver Information Display
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/ (DID)” for further information.
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
ParkSense Display
Rear Park Assist
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status.
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
3
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
3
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
WARNING ALERTS
59-47
47-39
inches
inches
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)
None
None
Rear Distance
(inches/
cm)
Arcs —
Left
Arcs —
Center
Arcs —
Right
Audible
Alert
Chime
Greater
than
79 inches
(200 cm)
None
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
None
None
None
None
3rd
Flashing
None
None
Single 1/2Second Tone
(for rear center only)
Radio
Volume
Reduced
No
Yes
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
None
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
39-25
inches
(100-65
cm)
None
25-12
inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
Fast
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Continuous
Yes
Yes
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if left and/or right front region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
Front Park Assist
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display
will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A
fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
when the 1st flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
No Tone/Solid Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
3
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Arcs — Left
Arcs — Center
Arcs — Right
Audible Alert
Chime
Radio Volume
Reduced
Greater than
47 inches (120
cm)
None
None
None
None
No
WARNING ALERTS
47-39 inches
39-25 inches
(120-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
None
4th Solid
None
None
None
3rd Flashing
None
None
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
Less than
12 inches (30
cm)
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous
No
No
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob- ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and Uconnect display.
brake pedal is applied.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Driver
from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Information Display (DID)” for further information.
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “UnWhen the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informasystem is disabled, the DID will display the
tion.
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume in REVERSE.
settings will not be accessible from the DID.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense graphic will be displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at eiswitch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED ther the front or rear sensor location depending on where
the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide
will be ON.
arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
arc alerts will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILDuring vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILdetected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE UNactuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the
FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL- vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to “Driver Information
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds. Display (DID)” for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to Reverse and the
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
system has detected a faulted condition, the Driver
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENInformation Display (DID) will display a ⬙PARKSENSE
SORS⬙ appears in the Driver Information Display (DID)
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE
make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ or
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then • Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense.
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see
an authorized dealer.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REwill display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
QUIRED⬙ message appears in the DID, see an authorized
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
dealer.
on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
Cleaning The ParkSense System
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
operating properly.
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
CAUTION! (Continued)
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
WARNING! (Continued)
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The ParkView
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire
surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds this note will disappear.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF
position.
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. The active guide lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera
each zone:
delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the
last touchscreen appears again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pushed.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunglasses Bin Door
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicle’s battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is
located above the center button.
Sunglasses Bin Door
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
Alarm is active.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
before you begin programming.
Overhead Console HomeLink Buttons
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
program while you push and hold the hand-held
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
transmitter button.
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actifrequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Revate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
complete the training.
from slow to rapid.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can channels.
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
in view.
follow these steps:
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
program while you push and hold the hand-held
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
transmitter button.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indirelease the button.
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programand then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Resteps.
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
before 1995.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink
follow these steps:
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the time-out in the same manner.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
release the button.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- door or gate motor.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
remaining steps.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) NOTE:
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programwhile keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indierase the channels.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
fully trained.
programming, plug it back in at this time.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage (Canadian/Gate Operator)
door may open and close while you are programming. To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
release the button.
erased.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
Troubleshooting Tips
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Security
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
3
The power shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
CommandView Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Express
WARNING! (Continued)
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Push and hold the shade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
opened condition until the switch is pushed again.
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again. Closing Power Shade — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
the halfway position and stop automatically. Push the
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
switch a second time from the halfway position and the
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
shade will automatically open to the full open position
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”.
During Express Open operation, any movement of the
shade switch will stop the shade.
Opening Power Shade — Express
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade
completely.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
Pinch Protect Feature
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed again.
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlet on the instrument panel and one 12 Volt (10
Amp) power outlet in the center console that can be used
to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power outlets are
labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to
indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled
with a “key” are powered when the ignition switch is in
the ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a
“battery” are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR
knob and element must be used.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
Front Power Outlet
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power NOTE: If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the center
console power outlet. When the Media Hub is not in use,
the outlet can deliver up to 120 Watts (10 Amps). If the
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
Center Console Power Outlet
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear
console USB ports can be changed to “battery” powered
all the time by moving the #12 20 Amp fuse from “IGN”
to “B+”. Refer to “Rear Power Distribution Center
Cover” in “Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)”.
WARNING!
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet /
Dual USB Charge Only Ports
2 — #38 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Center Console Power Outlet / Media Hub
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Front Cupholders
Heated And Cooled Cupholders — If Equipped
Retractable Cover
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled
cupholders. The cupholders are designed to help keep
warm beverages warm and cool beverages cool.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
WARNING!
When using the cupholder in the “Hot” position,
avoid contact with the heated portion of the cupholder in order to reduce the possibility of burns.
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise particular care in order to prevent serious burn injury.
Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects
when operated in the “Hot” position.
Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches
Push the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the cupholder;
push the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off.
Push the “Hot” symbol once to activate the cupholder;
push the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder.
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s el- On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with
bows.
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Seat Cupholders
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
STORAGE
Console Features
There is a cubby bin located forward of the gear selector.
The cubby bin is covered with a push-push actuated
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
door. Push inward on the door to open it, push the door
of the instrument panel.
a second time to close it.
Glove Compartment
Two separate storage compartments are also located
underneath the center console armrest.
Glove Compartment
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
like tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 volt power outlet,
USB and Aux jack are located here.
Center Console
Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable
upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on
rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
integrated coin holder, along with additional area for
small items and handheld devices. Below the upper tray,
the lower storage compartment is made for larger items,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Upper Storage Tray
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
Door Storage
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
The door panels contain storage areas.
3
Front Door Trim Storage
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the Split-Folding Rear Seat
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
compartment.
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Rear Armrest Storage
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Trunk Mat — If Equipped
A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area. The
trunk mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk from
mud, snow, and debris.
Grocery Bag Hooks
The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks,
located on either side of the rear cargo area.
Grocery Bag Hooks
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 50 lbs
(22 kg) of the grocery bag hook. Damage may occur to
hook and mounting surface.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Cargo Net
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
The rear cargo area is equipped with a cargo net.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control. Push this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
push the button a second time.
Rear Cargo Net
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Sunshade — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sunshade
that will reduce the amount of sunlight that will shine
through the rear windshield.
The power sunshade can be operated using the Uconnect
System.
Push the “Controls” button and then push the “Rear
Sunshade” button to raise the power sunscreen. Push the
“Sunshade” button a second time to lower the sunshade.
If the sunshade is in the raised position and the vehicle is
placed in REVERSE, the sunshade will automatically
fully lower. When the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE the sunshade will automatically return to the
fully raised position after a brief delay.
NOTE: The rear sunshade control switch can be locked
out along with the rear passenger window controls from
the driver switch window lockout switch.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
The power sunshade can also be operated by passengers
in the rears seats. The power sunshade switch is located
on the back of the center console between the heated seat
switches. Push the switch once to raise the sunshade.
Push the switch a second time to lower the sunshade.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a levelriding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
Power Sunshade Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped . . . .306
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .271 䡵 CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 䡵 SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .283 䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 8.4
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .301
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .334
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .336
▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .350
. .350
. .351
. .353
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .337
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .345
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . .361
▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . .367
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet
2 — Driver Information Display (DID) Controls
3 — Instrument Cluster
4 — Speed Controls
5 — Uconnect System
6 — Analog Clock
7 — Glove Compartment
8 — Uconnect System Hard Controls
13 — Headlight Switch
14 — Adaptive Cruise Control
9 — Switch Bank
10 — Climate Control Hard Controls
11 — Engine Start/Stop Button
12 — Trunk Release Button
15 —Uconnect Phone Controls
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
Premium Instrument Cluster
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Tachometer
5. Temperature Gauge
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem(RPM x 1000).
perature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
2. Driver Information Display (DID) Display
satisfactorily.
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temshows the Driver Information Display (DID) mesperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
sages. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furallowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
ther information.
operating range.
3. Speedometer
CAUTION!
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
points to the side of the
The fuel pump symbol
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
CAUTION! (Continued)
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer
to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
United States
Canada
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is dropped below a specified level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
the brake fluid level checked.
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesunless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
sary.
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will be sound for 4 minutes or until the engine is allowed to
cool whichever comes first.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Charging System Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase
engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is
experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an
authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase
the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
Trunk Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there a single chime will sound.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Rear Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Rear Fog Light Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 MPH (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
With Drive Modes the ESC OFF indicator will be lit any time the Traction modes is set to
Sport, Track or Full OFF.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.8 gal (10.6 L), this light will turn on and a
single chime will sound.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light
This light indicates a potential system fault with the FCW system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light
The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and steering torque warnings when
the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid green to solid yellow.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green to flashing
yellow.
Refer to “LaneSense - If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service.
Please see your authorized dealer.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn
signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when
the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Electronic Speed
Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light — If Equipped
This will display the distance setting for the ACC system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is ON. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has
been turned on and in the READY state. Refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is ON and the target vehicle is detected. Refer to ⬙ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)⬙ in ⬙Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle⬙ for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
• Speedometer
The Driver Information Display (DID) features an inter- •
active display which is located in the instrument cluster.
•
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pushing the arrow •
buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel. The •
DID Menu Items consists of the following:
•
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip
Audio
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Messages
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
• Screen Setup
Using the UP or DOWN arrows allows you to
cycles through the Main Menu Items.
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the LEFT or RIGHT arrow buttons
allows you to cycles through the submenu
items of the Main menu item.
DID Controls
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
• Within each submenu layer, the up/down arrows will
allow the user to select the item of interest.
NOTE:
• Holding the UP/DOWN or LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons will loop the user through the currently selected • Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a
menu or options presented on the screen.
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to
the 1st page of the submenu).
• Main menu and submenu’s wrap for continuous
scrolling.
• Pushing the LEFT arrow button will exit each submenu layer and return to the main menu.
• Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu
screen viewed within that main menu will be dis- For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new Perforplayed.
mance Timers):
• Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK
button.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer
• Pushing the OK button changes units (MPH or km/h).
For Screen Setup and Vehicle Settings:
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
• OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus. indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Use the steering wheel DID controls for the following
procedure(s):
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
OK or arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), 2. Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
refer to the following procedure.
scroll downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change 3. Push and release the RIGHT
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
arrow button to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
4. Push and hold the OK button to rest oil life. If Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
will update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
popup message of ⬙To reset oil life engine must be off
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
with ignition in run⬙ will be displayed (for 5 seconds),
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
and the user will remain at the Oil Life screen.
within 10 seconds.
or DOWN
arrow
5. Push and release the UP
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
button to exit the submenu screen.
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
OFF/LOCK position.
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display (DID) when the recommended gear shift point
has been reached. This indication notifies the driver that
changing gear will allow a reduction in fuel consumption.
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped
DID Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Speedometer
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) Location
The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system is enabled when
the automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The
GSI provides the driver with a visual indication, (+ or -)
beside the current gear, within the Driver Information
Push and release the OK button to toggle between MPH
and km/h.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist
The Vehicle Info consists of the following submenu:
• Coolant Temp
The Driver Assist menu provides the status and visuals
about the Adaptive Cruise Control and LaneSense features. When they are both off the screen, the display will
read ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and LaneSense Off⬙
• Trans Temp
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If Equipped
• Oil Temp
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
• Tire Pressure Monitor
• Oil Pressure
• Battery Voltage
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the DID:
• AWD Status — If Equipped
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• Oil Life
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• ACC Proximity Warning
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • ACC Unavailable Warning
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
Control Ready.”
five seconds of ACC display inactivity.
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
ACC SET
Vehicle” for further information.
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the LaneSense — If Equipped
instrument cluster.
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC The information displayed depends on LaneSense sysactivity occurs, which may include any of the following: tem status. Push the LaneSense button (located on the
center stack below the Uconnect display) until one of the
• Distance Setting Change
following displays in the DID:
• System Cancel
• LaneSense Off
• Driver Override
• When LaneSense is deactivated, the display will read
• System Off
“LaneSense Off.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
• Lane Sense On
– The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements
• When LaneSense is activated, the display will read
• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber
“LaneSense On.”
color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Understanding
• Hold the OK button to reset average fuel economy
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
information.
Fuel Economy
Trip Info
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Fuel Economy Menu item is displayed in the Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Trip Menu item is displayed in the EVIC.
DID.
or RIGHT
arrow button to
Toggle the LEFT
• Two submenu pages one with Current value (instanselect Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will
taneous calculation of the fuel economy) displayed
display the following:
and one without the Current Value displayed (toggle
• Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
left or right to select one):
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
– Range To Empty (miles or km)
– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel Screen Setup
economy (MPG or L/100 km) of Trip A or Trip B since Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
the last reset.
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push
• Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel and release the OK button to enter the submenus. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what
since the last reset.
information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
well as the location that information is displayed.
Audio
1. Upper Left
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
• Compass
until the Audio Menu displays in the DID.
• Outside Temp.
Stored Messages
• Time
• Range to Empty (default)
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
until the Messages Menu item is displayed in the DID.
This feature shows the number of stored warning
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
or LEFT
messages, if any. Pushing the RIGHT
• Trip A Distance
arrow button will allow you to scroll through the
• Trip B Distance
stored messages.
• None
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
2. Upper Right
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default)
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
3. Center
• Menu Title (default)
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Audio Inform
• Digital Speed
• None
4. Current Gear
• On
• Off (default)
5. Odometer
• Show (default)
• Hide
6. Fuel Gauge
• Standard (default)
• Detailed
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
7. Defaults
• Ok
• Cancel
CYBERSECURITY
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor- installed.
mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
WARNING!
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar
to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
NOTE:
consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Prac• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding tices” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your Owner’s
Manual Radio Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic
software updates.
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
UCONNECT SETTINGS
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
panel, push and hold the button until the setting is the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
correct.
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing
so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Setting The Analog Clock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off and
Back buttons on the faceplate.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the Screen Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Personal Data and System Information.
Uconnect Touchscreen.
NOTE:
Buttons On The Touchscreen
CAUTION!
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
Do not attach any object to touchscreen, doing so can
result in damage to the touchscreen.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
8.4 Settings
Press the “Apps
” button, then press the “Settings”
button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you
to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety
& Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option”
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the “X”
button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
down through the available settings.
⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
• Display Mode
the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
When in this display you may select one of the display
mode settings. To change Mode status, press and release NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
the “Manual” or “Auto” button on the touchscreen.
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
⬙parade⬙ positions.
When in this display, you may select the brightness with • Set Theme
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
When in this display, you may select the theme for the
the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
display screen. To make your selection, press the ⬙Set
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
theme option button until a check-mark appears showing next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
that the setting has been selected.
• Set Language
• Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has
been selected.
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
until it is manually closed. Press the “Control Screen
Time-Out” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
• Touchscreen Beep
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID) as
sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the
touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
• Fuel Consumption
Units
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
• Temperature
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
“km/L.”
• Pressure
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
Voice
• Speed
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
• Voice Response Length
• Distance
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the the “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
setting has been selected.
• Show Command List
• Set Time Hours
When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
settings, press the “Always,” “With Help” or “Never” time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se- buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down.
lected.
Clock
• Set Time Minutes
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
following settings will be available:
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
• Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
This feature will allow you to automatically have the down.
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
• Time Format
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far”
button. For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle”.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking
For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning
(LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your VeThe FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
hicle”.
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient • LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning The amount of directional torque the steering system can
Active Braking” button on the touchscreen, until a check- apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
had been selected. For further information, refer to
“Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Vehicle”.
• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
• Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust
lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” button on
provide either an “Early,” “Medium,” or “Late” warning the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steering feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort.
zone start point.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort.
Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to provide
a balance of steering feel and steering effort.
• Paddle Shifters — If Equipped
“Sound and Display” button. Refer to “ParkSense” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
• Front ParkSense Volume
The Front ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be
When this feature is selected, the paddle shifters can be selected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume
enabled or disabled. Select the “Enable” or “Disable” settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory
default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selecbutton on the touchscreen.
tion, press the “Front ParkSense Vol.” button on the
• ParkSense — If Equipped
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the indicating that the setting had been selected. ParkSense
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE will retain its last known configuration state through
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It ignition cycles.
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
• Rear ParkSense Volume
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be seParkSense status, press and release the “Sound Only” or lected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume
settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense Vol.” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. ParkSense
will retain its last known configuration state through
ignition cycles.
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side
Mirrors in Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected.
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the previously viewed screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the
“Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings”
button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving
Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Parkview Backup Camera Delay” button on the touch- Lights
screen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the
system will automatically activate the windshield wipers
if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your
selection, press the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval, and choose either 0, 30, 60 or
90 seconds.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that the setting has been
selected. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
or without the “Sound Horn on Lock” feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchnext to setting, showing that the setting has been sescreen the following settings will be available:
lected.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To the door locks are activated with the RKE. To make your
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit” selection, press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears Press” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
next to the setting, showing that the setting has been appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
selected.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
• Flash Lights With Lock
Doors & Locks
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
or without the “Sound Horn on Lock” feature selected. To
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
RKE transmitter).
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter • Passive Entry — If Equipped
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob (RKE) transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will result in only
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Refer
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle”.
• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
mirrors, steering column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatouchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start”
location (if Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob is set to
or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting,
ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
showing that setting has been selected.
used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for Engine Off Options
further information.
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
• Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seat” button
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
• Engine Off Power Delay
Audio
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-”
button on the touchscreen to select your desired time
interval, and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5
minutes” or “10 minutes.”
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
• Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
• Headlight Off Delay
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds touchscreen.
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch- finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
screen to select your desired time interval.
directly on the desired setting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Speed Adjusted Volume
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume Phone/Bluetooth
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen. After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. • Paired Phones
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound” This feature shows which phones are paired to the
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the “Uconnect Supplement Manual.”
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the “Uconnect Supplement Manual.”
• Loudness — If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchthe screen or visit the provider online.
screen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
• Channel Skip
and is available for U.S. residents only.
SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip. Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
• Subscription Information
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
• Restore Settings
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to
services, it will be necessary to access the information on their default settings. To restore the settings to their
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
default setting, press the “Restore Settings” button. A
pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
reset your settings to default?” select “OK” to restore,
to access the Subscription Information screen.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once System Information
the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating After pressing the “System Information” button on the
⬙Settings reset to default.⬙
touchscreen the following information will be available:
Clear Personal Data
• System Information
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button When System Information is selected, a System Informaon the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- tion screen will appear displaying the system software
able:
version.
• Clear Personal Data
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal
data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to clear,
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once This feature allows an external USB device to be plugged
the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating into the USB port.
⬙Personal data cleared”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
The Media hub also allows the use of an SD card. For Located on the rear of the front center console are dual
further information, refer to the Uconnect Supplement USB “Charge Only” ports.
Manual.
4
Rear USB Charging Ports
AUX/USB/SD Card Ports
1 — Aux Jack
2 — USB Port
3 — SD Card Slot
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery
operated USB devices when connected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear push-button in the center and controls the volume and
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
positions.
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/
AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
The button located in the center of the left-hand control 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
grammed in the radio preset button.
too high.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
precautions:
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratchyour radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
turned down or off during mobile device operation when Touchscreen
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Buttons On The Faceplate
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to Uconnect screen.
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect system display.
When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,
Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The Faceplate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
1. MAX A/C Button
Uconnect system screen.
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. AUTO Operation Button
6. Rear Defrost Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow
for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. SYNC
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow
for warmer temperature settings.
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will 10. Blower Control
automatically exit Sync.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
forced through the climate system. There are seven
Provides the passenger with independent temperature blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
speeds can be selected using either the blower control 11. Modes
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
as follows:
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower as follows:
• Panel Mode
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
control knob counterclockwise.
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted
to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
Button On The Touchscreen
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
area between the icons.
from these outlets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler
temperature settings.
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
and side window demister outlets.
time.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem- NOTE:
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
warmer temperature settings.
needed.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lotime.
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
Climate Control Functions
the front of the radiator and through the condenser.
A/C (Air Conditioning)
MAX A/C
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforsystem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, mance.
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
ON.
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
Recirculation Control
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
Automatic Operation
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is 1. Press the AUTO button on the faceplate or the AUTO
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic TemperaRecirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pasunits by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
senger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect System Settings” in this
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
section of the manual.
automatically maintain that comfort level.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
system to function automatically.
Manual Operation Override
NOTE:
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation conThe system automatically adjusts the temperature, trol.
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
as possible.
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automatically.
Winter Operation
Operating Tips
Vacation Storage
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
suggested control settings for various weather condi- (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
tions.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
Summer Operation
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instrucperiods, as fogging may occur.
tions.
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Manual Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
these steps:
The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 8.4A/
8.4AN system.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Main Menu
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
Uconnect 8.4AN
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4A system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
4
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
TIP: Press the “browse” button on the touchscreen to see
all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Media
4
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the “phonebook” button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commands:
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
the Phone button
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without
No.
I’ll be late.
me.
Okay.
Where are you? I will be <number> minutes
Are you there
Call me.
late.
yet?
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
use your voice to send a text message.
steering wheel if equipped.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
4
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the
beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate
navigation at any time.)
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:
. After
• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. After
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
9-1-1 Call
Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
Security Alarm Notification
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
Roadside Assistance Call
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
WiFi Hotspot***
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found **If vehicle is equipped.
on the next page.
***Extra charges apply.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
Assist Button
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
” button on the touchscreen to
press the “Apps
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
4
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
Mobile App
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
. After
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and 1. To send a message, push the Phone button
the beep, say the following command: “Send mespress Link.
sage to John Smith.”
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you 2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
process your message.
your personalized music.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
• Once you download the app to your compatible
mobile device, you will also be able to start your
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere.
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
4
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Press the “Apps
TIP:
” button on the touchscreen.
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if 2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchuse your voice to send a text message.
, then say: “YELP
screen, push the VR button
search.”
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be 4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
illuminated to use the feature.
Uconnect to find.
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
Yelp
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com- Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
mand.
If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings,
set reminders, and more. For further information go to
the
Mopar
Owner
Connect
website
moparownerconnect.com.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were using Do
Not Disturb.
SiriusXM Travel Link
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
Automatic reply messages can be:
General Information
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.” This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac- two conditions:
ters.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter- NOTE:
rupted by incoming calls.
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
NOTE:
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPvoid the user’s authority to operate the device.
hones.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num• Auto reply with text message is only available on
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speciphones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
fications were met.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Additional Information
Uconnect System Support:
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) for U.S. residents call:
1-877-855-8400 or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Canadian residents (English) call: 1-800-465-2001 Canadian residents (French) call: 1-800-387-9983 or visit
DriveUconnect.ca.
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
Uconnect Access Services Support: 1-855-792-4241 Please
have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .383
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .384
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 䡵 AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
䡵 SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . .
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .381
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .381
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. .394
. .394
. .395
. .395
. .396
. .396
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .410
䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .410
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .415
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .403
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .403
▫ Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Rainy Brake Support (RBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .423
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .428
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .431
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ 5.7L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .452
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .440
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .442
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .443
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . .
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . .
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . .
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .460
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. . . .461
. . . .462
. . . .462
. . . .462
. . . .463
. . . .463
. . . .464
. . . .464
. . . .467
Weight
. . . .468
. . . .469
. . . .470
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive . . . . . .476
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION! (Continued)
The gear selector must be in the PARK position before
you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting
into any driving gear.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob is
in the passenger compartment.
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
2.
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will
shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector is
in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF
position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once, the DID will display a “Vehicle Not In Park”
message and the engine will remain running. Never
leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
4. If the shift lever/gear selector is in Neutral, push and 1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position:
release the ENGINE START/STOP button with the
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
vehicle speed below 5mph (8 km/h) before the engine
change the ignition to the ACC position.
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
in the ACC position.
to change the ignition to the RUN position.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in 4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position.
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
OFF position.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availDriver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN.
To change the ignition switch positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
After Starting
WARNING!
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
WARNING!
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in rethe driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
is located near the air box.
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
ⴖOFFⴖ mode. Remove the Key Fob from the vehicle,
and lock the vehicle. When the keyless ignition is
in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
shifting out of PARK.
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
Key Ignition Park Interlock
stopped or moving at low speeds.
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmission gear range (PRNDL/S) is displayed both above the
gear selector and in the Driver Information Display
(DID). To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear
selector. To access the L or S position, push down on the
gear selector and then rotate it. You must also press the
brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to
shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped. To shift past multiple gear ranges at
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range
for normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
Standard Gear Selector
Premium Gear Selector With AutoStick
The standard transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions.
Using the LOW position manually downshifts the transmission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed.
The premium transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick
shift control (shift paddles mounted on the steering
wheel). Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the
DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to “AutoStick” in
this section for further information.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
Gear Selector
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARK (P)
WARNING!
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
ⴖOFFⴖ mode. Remove the Key Fob from the vehicle,
and lock the vehicle. When the keyless ignition is
in the “OFF” mode, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage
the drivetrain.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicator should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position (P).
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
leave the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified dependThis range should be used for most city and highway
ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downvehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- SPORT (S) — If Equipped
tics under all normal operating conditions.
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are inwhen operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- creased to make full use of available engine power. To
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or access SPORT mode, push down on the gear selector and
while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift rotate it fully clockwise, or push the SPORT button in the
control (if equipped; refer to AutoStick in this section for center stack.
further information) to select a lower gear. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
DRIVE (D)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
Use this range for engine braking when descending very
indicate what actions may be necessary.
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downshift for increased engine braking. To access the LOW In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
fully clockwise.
LOW (L) — If Equipped
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
Transmission function is monitored electronically for indicates the transmission may not re-engage after enabnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may 1. Stop the vehicle.
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
turns OFF.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
trailer towing, and many other situations.
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
Operation
operation.
5. Restart the engine.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
will operate automatically, shifting between the eight
available gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap one of
the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in
DRIVE or SPORT mode. In DRIVE mode, this will
activate a temporary AutoStick mode. The transmission
will revert back to normal operation after a period of
time, depending on accelerator pedal activity. When the
transmission gear selector is in the SPORT position,
tapping either shift paddle will activate ⬙permanent⬙
AutoStick mode. The transmission will remain in
AutoStick mode until the driver deliberately disables
AutoStick (as described below). Tapping (-) to enter
AutoStick will downshift the transmission to the next
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick will retain • If AutoStick is engaged while the transmission gear
the current gear. When AutoStick is active, the current
selector is in the SPORT position, manual gear selection will be maintained until the gear selector is
transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
returned to DRIVE, or as described below. The transIn AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
mission will not upshift automatically at redline in this
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the acceleraunless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
tor pedal is pressed to the floor.
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described • In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will
automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prebelow.
vent engine lugging) and will display the current gear.
• If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
transmission will automatically shift up when maxi- • The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
mum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is fully
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
depressed, the transmission will downshift when possible (based on current vehicle speed and gear). Lack
vehicle is accelerated.
of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to automatic operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in second gear.
Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold the (+)
shift paddle until ⬙D⬙ or ⬙S⬙ is once again indicated in the
instrument cluster. Shifting out of SPORT mode will also
disable AutoStick. You can shift in or out of AutoStick
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
accelerator pedal.
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is engaged.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
provide improved throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced driving experience, as well the
greatest amount of steering feel. This mode may be
activated and deactivated by pushing the Sport button on
the instrument panel switch bank.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available
optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and
driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by
automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear
wheels as necessary.
Sport Mode Button
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This
mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast
driving. The engine, transmission and steering systems
are all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will
To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automatically defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and
environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is
unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental
conditions require increased levels of road traction, the
vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
AWD operation could be activated by outside temperaCAUTION!
ture, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there
may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually se- Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
lected by activating AutoStick mode (+/-), engaging size may cause failure of the front differential and/or
Sport Mode or activating the windshield wipers for an the transfer case.
extended period of time. Drive mode, RWD or AWD, can
be found in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “UnderstandAcceleration
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slipNOTE: If the “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM” warning mespery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
sage appears after engine start up, or during driving, it
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
means that the AWD system is not functioning properly
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
and that service is required. Refer to “Driver Information
the rear (driving) wheels.
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Traction
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for imsurface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause proved handling.
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping DRIVING THROUGH WATER
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precauDriving through water more than a few inches/
tions should be observed:
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
slushy.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer Programmable Features” or “Performance Control — If
Equipped” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF
– SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed
within the Driver Information Display (DID), this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever/gear
selector in the PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly press the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
Parking Brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever/gear selector in
PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift
lever/gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still function. There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident by increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake Warning
Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
OFF), the brakes will still function. The effort required to (ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
with the power system operating.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high performance braking system. The brake pads are a semimetallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance
for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type
of brake pad is that the brakes may produce more brake
dust and may squeal slightly under certain weather and
operating conditions (i.e., during light brake applications) this is considered normal conditions.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), and Rain Brake Support (RBS).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased • The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
short time after the stop).
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the • Brake pedal pulsations.
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started • A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
service is required. However, the conventional brake benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braksystem will continue to operate normally if the “Brake ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
System Warning Light” is not on.
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
WARNING!
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
repaired as soon as possible.
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue • HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
roll down the hill as normal.
will remain active.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
Disabling And Enabling HSA
4. Start the engine.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the 5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
current setting, proceed as follows:
turn to the left.
• For vehicles equipped with the Driver Information 6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
Display (DID), refer to “Driver Information Display
bank below the climate control four times within
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
further information.
turn on and turn off two times.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to 7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instruadditional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.
ment Panel” for further information.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
For vehicles not equipped with the DID, perform the
back to the ON position. If the sequence was comfollowing steps:
pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
maintain the desired path.
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ- path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen- the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the approtial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the understeer condition.
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” loThis system enhances directional control and stability of
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC coras the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Traction Control System (TCS)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
ESC On
will turn off.
ESC Operating Modes
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode
may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,
which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
“ESC OFF” message will display in the Driver Information Display (DID). To turn ESC ON again, momentarily
• For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a mopush the “ESC Off” switch.
mentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to NOTE: System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial
return to ESC On.
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
speed the system will return to ESC Full Off.
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes – if
• ⬙ESC Sport⬙ and ⬙ESC Track⬙ (If equipped) are ESC
equipped.
partial off mode(s).
NOTE:
Full Off – If Equipped
WARNING!
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter
the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch
for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound,
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode
is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESC OFF Indicator Light
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a NOTE:
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momenvehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
or other vehicles.
that caused the ESC activation.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
available ESC modes.
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
WARNING!
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rainy Brake Support (RBS)
WARNING! (Continued)
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
Rainy Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rainy Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
Tire And Loading Information Placard
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (294 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [294 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Tread Wear
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
Fuel Economy
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
ride.
NOTE:
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the door.
vehicle to drift left or right.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
At least once a month:
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidepocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
wall.
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION!
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, althe Winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
which could damage the valve stem.
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Repair
Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full Wheel — If Equipped
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
mode.
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
WARNING!
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” only. With these spares, do not drive more than
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
80D18 103M.
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
WARNING!
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Inspare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
first opportunity.
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Tire Spinning
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
5
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainbecomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
WARNING!
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
those of the original wheels.
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu- It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
WARNING!
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex- • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
of unapproved tires and wheels may change susthis manual for more information relating to the Load
pension dimensions and performance characterisIndex and Speed Symbol of a tire.
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
(Continued)
Replacement Tires
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance for a Rear Wheel Drive
(RWD) vehicle, on P215/65R17, P225/60R18 and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
P235/55R18 tires with a Security Chain Company
(SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended.
• Due to limited clearance for an All Wheel Drive
(AWD) vehicle, P235/55R19, 235/55R19 tires with the
use of a traction device that meets the SAE type “Class
S” specification is recommended.
• No other tire sizes are recommended for use with a tire
chain or traction device.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
unequal rates.
reversed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
Tire Rotation
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
there should be no adjustment for this increased presThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the sure.
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
mended cold placard pressure.
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
NOTE:
CAUTION! (Continued)
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, The TPMS consists of the following components:
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• Receiver module
the tire.
• Four TPM sensors
Premium System
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
Information Display (DID)
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each • TPM Telltale Light
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the DID will display a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values shown in a
different color.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
display in the DID will change color back to the original
color, and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
shown in a different color in the DID graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service TPMS Warning
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
wheel housings.
DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
not being received.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
the compact spare tire.
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnfollowing:
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM
Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound.
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
In addition, the graphic in the DID will still display a
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
pressure value in a different color.
the TPM sensors.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
TPMS to receive this information.
addition, the DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
General Information
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for following two conditions:
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID will
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a (1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) (2) This device must accept any interference received,
in place of the pressure value.
including interference that may cause undesired opera5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and tion.
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the by the party responsible for compliance could void the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in user’s authority to operate the equipment.
the DID will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine — If Equipped
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent 5.7L Engine — If Equipped
fuel economy and performance when usThis engine is designed to meet all emising high-quality unleaded “Regular” gasosions regulations and provide satisfactory
line having an octane rating of 87 as specifuel economy and performance when usfied by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having
“Premium” gasoline will not provide any benefit over
an octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by
“Regular” gasoline in these engines.
the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoWhile operating on gasoline with an octane number of
line is recommended for optimum performance and fuel
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
economy.
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme- While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme- Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxythan 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be genates such as ethanol.
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop- Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im- than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may MMT In Gasoline
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
Warranty.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasobeyond gasoline of the same octane number without
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limlife and reduces emissions system performance in some
ited Warranty.
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• Operate in a lean mode.
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
and California reformulated gasoline.
• Poor engine performance.
Materials Added To Fuel
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
that have these additives will help improve fuel Fuel System Cautions
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline conCAUTION!
tains a higher level of detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail- Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
able the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom- performance:
mended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perDetergent Gasoline Retailers.
formance and damage the emissions control sysIndiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
tem.
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
and diaphragm materials.
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please
refer to the other sections of this manual for information
on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Requirements
NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
rough idle following start up may be experienced even
if the above recommendations are followed, especially
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
additive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron
least 5 miles (8 km).
may be used.
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up. Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
When switching fuel types:
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
FCA Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that
engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
FCA US LLC engines.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per
liter and the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Starting
Replacement Parts
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
CAUTION!
until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may compatible components can damage your vehicle.
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
ADDING FUEL
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Maintain nozzle in filler for 5 seconds to allow nozzle
to drain.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
Fuel Funnel
CAUTION!
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release located in the trunk.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Follow the steps below to open the fuel door in case of an 3. Pull the release cable.
emergency:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
trim panel).
5
Release Cable
VEHICLE LOADING
Access Cover
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Vehicle Certification Label
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door. load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
• Month and year of manufacture
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
WARNING! (Continued)
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
Overloading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
it is not over the GVWR.
the brakes operate.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Common Towing Definitions
• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and you in understanding the following information:
GAWRs.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
tire pressure.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
In this section you will find safety tips and information Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do further information.
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
and safely as possible.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temTo maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
ready for operation⬙ condition.
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
TRAILER TOWING
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
the load on your vehicle.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- Frontal Area
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
information.
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
Trailer Hitch Classification
WARNING! (Continued)
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
3.6L Automatic
5.7L Automatic
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Weight)
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Frontal Area
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire
and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Max. Tongue Weight (See
Note)
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Consider the following items when computing the
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements
WARNING! (Continued)
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury collision.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper- Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
ating” for information on tire pressures and for proper • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
tire inflation procedures.
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation prespersonal injury.
sures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for informaa hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper
brake controller is not required.
inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor- • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for information
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
Towing Tips
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
heavy traffic.
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
Automatic Transmission
you can get back to cruising speed.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The • Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
maximize fuel efficiency.
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick — If Equipped
AutoStick shift control (if equipped) select a lower gear. • When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
under heavy loading conditions will improve perforthe desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
Cooling System
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind anTo reduce potential for engine and transmission over- other vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
heating, take the following actions:
OFF the ground.
City Driving
CAUTION!
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .478 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .491
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
478 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
center of the instrument panel between the center air IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
outlets.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning potential for overheating by taking the appropriate acflashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- tion.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• On the highways — slow down.
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
speed.
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
6
482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Open the trunk.
WARNING! (Continued)
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
Opening The Access Panel
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
6
Jack Fastener
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under
the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen
the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack
assembly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For exPreparations For Jacking
ample, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE or FIRST gear.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Jack Warning Label
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
Jacking Locations
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one 4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
6
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
Front Jacking Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Mounting Spare Tire
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
use, and operation.
them checked with a torque wrench by your autho8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
rized dealer or at a service station.
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before
WARNING!
tightening down the fastener.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut
torque.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
lug nuts.
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
CAUTION!
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
Remote Battery Post Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and cycle the ignition to OFF.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
positive (+) post of the booster battery.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
vehicle.
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
you should have the battery and charging system in- the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
spected at your authorized dealer.
wheels or racing the engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than 2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” in your Owner’s
Manual on the DVD for further information. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to
restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual 4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
Park Release lever.
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing
it to the right.
Manual Park Release Lever Location
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the
tether strap up through the opening in the console
base.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Locking Tab Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499
5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged To Reset The Manual Park Release:
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position.
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is 2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
down, to its original position, until the locking tab
snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Tether Strap Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF The Ground
NONE
Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Front
Rear
Flatbed
ALL
RWD MODELS
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max
distance
NOT RECOMMENDED
(but, if used, same limitations as above)
NOT RECOMMENDED
BEST METHOD
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED,
but, if used:
• Ignition in ON/RUN
position
• Transmission in NEUTRAL (NOT in Park)
BEST METHOD
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
discharged, refer to ⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
for towing.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, AWD
models can also be towed with the ignition in the
ON/RUN position, the transmission in NEUTRAL (not
in PARK!), and the rear wheels OFF the ground with no
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
502 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
limitation on speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST
be in the ON/RUN position to tow in this manner, AWD
vehicles must be towed with ALL FOUR wheels OFF the
ground (e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the Key Fob is
unavailable.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle using any other method can
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.
• Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, this vehicle may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions
on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the
engine is off.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of towing
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
is with a flatbed truck.
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 503
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Without The Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
approved method of towing without the Key Fob is with
a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .510
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp . . . . . .563
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . .538
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps . . .565
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .547
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .552
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .565
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Fluid Capacities — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Fluid Capacities — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
▫ Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
▫ Engine — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Engine — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”. It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices” and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
“Uconnect CyberSecurity” in “ All About Uconnect Access” in your Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and
“Cybersecurity” in “Understanding Your Instrument
WARNING!
Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD.
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
PROGRAMS
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
tracking device, it may:
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
For states that require an Inspection and Maintesafety related systems, could be impaired or a
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
stored in your vehicle systems, including per- system is ready for testing.
sonal information.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace- • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
not proceed to the I/M station.
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
following:
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
not crank or start the engine.
to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
start this test over.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light you may need to do nothing more than drive your
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
check.
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CAUTION! (Continued)
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level — 3.6L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
regular intervals, such as once a month. The best time to Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
fully warmed engine is shut off.
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will regular intervals, such as once a month. The best time to
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the fully warmed engine is shut off.
dipstick. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
on these engines.
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
liter) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the
“SAFE” range will result in an oil level at the top of the
“SAFE” range on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
This symbol means that the oil has
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informabeen certified by the American
tion.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intermanufacturer only recommends
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
API Certified engine oils.
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 enconcern for fleet customers.
gine oils.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil Viscosity — 5.7L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix
or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
meeting MS-6395 is not available.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi- Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
should not be used.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Synthetic Engine Oils
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomstation or governmental agency for advice on how and
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomwhere used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
your area.
are followed.
Engine Oil Filter
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
filter and are recommended.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recomRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Maintenance
mended.
Schedules” section for the proper maintenance intervals.
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “JumpStarting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Battery Location
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
— If Equipped
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a
low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
7
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used filter.
Access Door
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
A/C Air Filter
5. Close the filter access cover.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
maintenance intervals.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
Windshield Wiper Blades
Adding Washer Fluid
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
from a dry windshield.
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependrating information can be found on most washer fluid
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
containers.
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of have an authorized technician inspect the complete exwasher fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
appears in the Driver Information Display (DID).
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
WARNING!
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
Commercially available windshield washer solvents for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
WARNING!
the washer solution.
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
Exhaust System
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
system.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
information.
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
(Continued)
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning Cooling System
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
WARNING!
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica- • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition
tions, should be obtained immediately.
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperaTo minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damture controlled and can start at any time the igniage:
tion switch is in the ON position.
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
motion.
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
vehicle.
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic Coolant Checks
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rublocal authorized dealer.
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
leaks.
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but MS.90032).
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. maintenance intervals.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
CAUTION! (Continued)
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioning this extended maintenance period, it is important that
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conformwill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) NOTE:
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
operated.
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
terial Standard MS.90032.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
dealer for assistance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
WARNING! (Continued)
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
WARNING!
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
spills immediately.
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for Points To Remember
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporThe radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
a month.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antioperation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezperformance, poor gas mileage, and increased emising.
sions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested Brake System
for leaks.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a system components should be inspected periodically.
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion maintenance intervals.
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
WARNING!
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
WARNING! (Continued)
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “MainCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
if the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
WARNING!
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
7
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should may adversely affect seals.
be used.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis- The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and
sion damage.
front differential. The exterior surface of these components should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks.
CAUTION!
Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho- The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam- the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole.
Use this plug to add fluid as required.
Fluid And Filter Changes
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differthe factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the ential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level
life of the vehicle.
should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How- hole.
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
Fluid Changes
Change Axle Fluid
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
maintenance intervals.
Rear Axle
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contamiFluid Level Check
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condiaxle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. underbody protection.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The following maintenance recommendations will enable Washing
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veresistance built into your vehicle.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
What Causes Corrosion?
clear water.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumupaint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
The most common causes are:
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
• Stone and gravel impact.
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Special Care
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
this finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
Interior Care
required to maintain the original condition.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Headlights
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
directly on the mirror.
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
WARNING!
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
7
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
CAUTION!
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed
on the inside of the power distribution center cover.
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Front Power Distribution Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
1
2
3
Cartridge Fuse
–
40 Amp Green
50 Amp Red
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
11
12
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
Electric Power Steering #1 – If Equipped /
Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) – If
Equipped
Starter
Electronic Stability Control
Electronic Stability Control
Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
Security – If Equipped / Under hood Lamp
– Police
Horns
Air Conditioning Clutch
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
Cavity
13
14
15
16
18
19
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
50 Amp Red
50 Amp Red
Mini-Fuse
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
20
21
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
40 Amp Green / 20
Amp Blue – Police
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
–
–
22
23
24
–
–
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Left HID – If Equipped
Right HID – If Equipped
Radiator Fan #2 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
Electric Power Steering #2 – If Equipped /
Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged)
Wiper Motor
Headlamp Washers – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged)
/ Police Bat Feed # 3
Police Bat Feed # 1
Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3
7
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
28
29
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
15 Amp Blue
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Clear
–
–
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Fuse – Spare
Transmission Control Module (Challenger/
Charger Police) / Electronic Shift Module
(Challenger)
Fuse – Spare
Engine Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Powertrain #1
Powertrain #2
Anti-Lock Brake Module
Engine Controller / Rad Fan Relays
(Charger/300) / Electric Power Steering
Module (Charger/300) / Fuel Pump Relay
(Charger/300) / 5–Speed
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
Cavity
38
39
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
48
–
10 Amp Red
49
50
51
52
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
53
–
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Airbag Module
EPS (Challenger) / EHPS (Police)/AC
Clutch Relay / Vacuum Pump Relay / Fuel
Pump Relay (Challenger) / Rad Fan Relays
(Challenger)
AWD Module (Charger/300) / Front Axle
Disconnect (Charger/300) / Adaptive
Cruise (Challenger) – If Equipped
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Vacuum Pump
Adaptive Cruise (Charger/300) – If
Equipped
Fuse – Spare
7
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed on the inside of the power distribution center cover.
Rear Power Distribution Center
Opening The Access Cover
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
2
3
4
5
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
Description
Front PDC Feed #1
Fuse – Spare
Front PDC Feed #2
Sunroof/Dome Lamp – Police
6
7
8
9
10
11
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
–
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
12
–
20 Amp Yellow
Exterior Lighting #1
Exterior Lighting #2
Interior Lighting
Power Locks
Driver Door Control Module
Passenger Door Control Module
Dual USB Center Console
Rear/Cigar Lighter IP – If
Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
Cavity
15
16
17
18
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
–
30 Amp Pink
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow – Police
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
HVAC Blower
Left Spot Lamp – Police
Fuse – Spare
Mod Network Interface – Police
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuel Pump
Right Spot Lamp – Police
Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
Integrated Center Stack
Tire Pressure Monitor
Cygnus Transmission Module
(Charger/300)/Electronic
Shift Module (Charger/300)
7
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
27
31
32
33
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Breaker
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
34
–
10 Amp Red
35
36
–
–
5 Amp Tan
15 Amp Blue
37
38
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
40
–
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Amplifier – If Equipped
Power Seats – If Equipped
HVAC Module/Cluster
Ignition Switch/RF Hub
Module/Steering Column
Lock (300) – If Equipped
Steering Column Module/
Clock (300)
Battery Sensor
Electronic Exhaust Valve – If
Equipped
Radio
Power Outlet Inside Arm
Rest/Console Media Hub
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
Cavity
41
42
43
Cartridge Fuse
–
30 Amp Pink
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
44
–
10 Amp Red
45
–
15 Amp Blue
46
47
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Fuse – Spare
Rear Defrost
Comfort Seat And Steering
Wheel Module (Heated Steering Wheel/RR Heated Seats)
Park Assist / Blind Spot /
Rear View Camera
Cluster / Rearview Mirror /
Compass (Charger/300) /
Humidity Sensor
Fuse – Spare
Adaptive Front Lighting /
Auto High BEAM / Day
Time Running Lamps – If
Equipped
7
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
48
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
49
50
51
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
52
–
10 Amp Red
53
–
10 Amp Red
54
55
56
57
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Active Suspension – If
Equipped
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Front Heated Seats – If
Equipped
Heated Cupholders/Rear
Heated Seat Switches – If
Equipped
HVAC Module/In Vehicle
Temperature Sensor
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
Cavity
58
59
60
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Breaker
10 Amp Red
–
10 Amp Red
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Airbag Module
Adjustable Pedals – Police
Heated Washer Nozzles
(Charger)
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Rear Windows (Charger/300)
Airbag Module
Fuse – Spare
Rain and Light Sensor / Sunroof / Inside RR View Mirror
/ Power Outlet Illumination
(Center Console) / Police Run
Acc Relay
7
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
68
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
69
70
–
–
–
–
VEHICLE STORAGE
Description
Dual USB Power Outlet –
R/A Sense (Charger/300)
Rear Sunshade (Charger/300)
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the and should not be used for replacement.
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps
W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp
562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
578
Visor Vanity Lamps
A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped
194
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
9005HL+
D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
PSY24WSV
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen Headlamp)
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp)
Front Turn Signal Lamp
Front Park Lamp
Daytime Running Lamp
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped
Front Sidemarker Lamp
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp
Rear Sidemarker Lamp
Backup Lamp
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
License
Rear Fog Lamp – If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
BULB REPLACEMENT
WARNING!
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
Standard Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp
headlamp switch off and the ignition turned to the OFF
position. Because of this, you should not attempt to 1. Open the hood.
service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
service.
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp (outboard) bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to
unlock it.
4. Twist the headlamp bulb assembly counterclockwise,
and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring assembly and
1. Open the hood.
install the replacement bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb and wiring assembly into the head- NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
7. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp hous2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the turn
ing and rotate it clockwise to lock it.
signal (inboard) bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to
unlock it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
4. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps
pull straight out from the lamp assembly.
The Rear Backup and Turn Signal Lamp use LED sources
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring connector and that are not serviceable separately. The Rear Lamps must
be replaced as an assembly, please see your authorized
install the replacement bulb.
dealer.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly straight into
License Lamp
the lamp until it locks in place.
7. Install the turn signal bulb cap in the headlamp The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not
serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be rehousing and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
placed as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamp
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp must be The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not serviceable separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be replaced as
replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fluid Capacities — 3.6L
Fuel (Approximate)
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol or up to 85% Ethanol for Flex Fuel (E85) Engine
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified
Cooling System*
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
U.S.
Metric
18.5 Gallons
69.9 Liters
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
10 Quarts
9.5 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
Fluid Capacities — 5.7L
Fuel (Approximate)
89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified
Cooling System*
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
or equivalent – without Severe Duty II Cooling System
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
or equivalent – with Severe Duty II Cooling System
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
U.S.
Metric
18.5 Gallons
69.9 Liters
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
14.5 Quarts
13.9 Liters
15 Quarts
14.3 Liters
7
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
CAUTION! (Continued)
Important Information
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
Engine — 3.6L
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
87 Octane, Up to 85% Ethanol.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine — 5.7L
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable,
0-15% Ethanol.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission — 8-Speed Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Transfer Case
Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic
Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the
correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE
J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT
4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use MOPAR OD Synthetic Gear
Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use MOPAR Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–40.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
574 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
The “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in
the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
oil change is necessary.
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
scheduled maintenance.
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
indicator message will illuminate. This means that serreferring to the steps described under “Driver Informavice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
tion Dispay (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
Panel” for further information.
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interquired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 concern for fleet customers.
miles (805 km).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 575
Severe Duty All Models
Required Maintenance Intervals:
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is page for the required maintenance intervals.
operated predominantly at idle or only very low engine
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Change Indicator System:
Duty.
• Change oil and filter
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
• Check engine oil level.
wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
required
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering (if equipped) and • Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
fill as needed.
off-road conditions
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8
576 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals,
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle
fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary.
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four
wheel disc brakes.
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
32,000
Maintenance Chart
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs.**
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
Inspect the transfer case fluid. Change the transfer
case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 577
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
X
X
X
X
8
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
32,000
578 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Change the rear axle fluid and on models
equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
X
X
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 579
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .587
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .584
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . .585
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .588
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
582 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 583
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
584 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 247-9753
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 585
In Mexico Contact
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Service Contract
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
586 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARNING!
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 587
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
MOPAR PARTS
WARRANTY INFORMATION
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
588 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootmanuals (no P.O. Boxes).
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 589
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
590 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving Temperature Grades
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac- The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
teristics and climate.
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
Traction Grades
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforpassenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
mance.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
WARNING!
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 591
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
594 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400, 402
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .178
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Adjust
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61, 63
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 101, 273
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .519
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348, 522
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .347, 349
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521, 522
Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345, 521
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 595
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 276
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
All Wheel Drive
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394, 538
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530, 566
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . .338, 345
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384, 538
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538, 568, 571
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536, 537
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 571
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Autostick
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
AWD
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 571
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 571
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
596 INDEX
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 519
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .25
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Beverage Holder Cooled (Cupholder) . . . . . . . . . . .252
Beverage Holder Heated (Cupholder) . . . . . . . . . . .252
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 571
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402, 534
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535, 568, 571
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274, 402
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560, 563
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 560
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 454
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 597
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .511
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .91
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .90
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .84
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .80
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .334
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .532
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528, 533
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
598 INDEX
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530, 566, 568, 569, 570
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298, 300
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252, 546
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 515
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .35
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 31
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 599
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Driver Information Display
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303, 306
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .303, 306
Driver Information Display (DID)
Driver Information Display (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . .
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System .
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.455
.247
.261
.121
.403
.404
.415
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .547
Electronic Speed Control
(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174, 175, 178
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .279
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491, 492, 493
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .511
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
600 INDEX
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 515
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508, 509
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . .528, 568, 569, 570
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 454
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491, 492, 493
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 566, 568, 569, 570
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516, 566
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451, 455
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 454
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 526
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348, 522
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518, 568, 569, 570
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 158, 297
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 601
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455, 456
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 571
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 515
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .568
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 283
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451, 455
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450, 568, 569, 570
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 569, 570
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
602 INDEX
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .234, 241
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Gauges
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 465
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 464
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .159
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 166
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 143
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 143
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .159
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 603
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481, 485
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491, 492, 493
Ignition
Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 25
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 25
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . .269, 276, 281, 294, 297
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 377
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 328
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
604 INDEX
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 560
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 328 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 152
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 101, 273
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274, 402
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298, 300
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 159
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 283
LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152, 563
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 166
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 605
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .284
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .163
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 296
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 232
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560, 563
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .288, 443
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 157, 158, 297
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .276, 297
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461, 463
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
606 INDEX
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .284, 511
Manual Park Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
MOPAR Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513, 587
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . .450, 568, 569, 570
Oil, Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303, 514, 568, 569, 570
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 515
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 515
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518, 568, 569, 570
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516, 566
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 607
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517, 566
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 588
Paddle Shifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Paddle Shift Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .424
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .247
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power Seats
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
608 INDEX
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .22
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .532
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 19, 27, 31, 41
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Rear Wheel Drive
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 609
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 25
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 25
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .336
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . . .330
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 143
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
RWD
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
610 INDEX
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .55
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 50, 53
Seat Belt
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .55
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .58
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 135, 138, 139
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 135
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 143
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137, 138, 139
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 101
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 611
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 276
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . .568, 569, 570
SENTRY KEY
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Setting The Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381, 384
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 158, 297
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434, 435, 436, 482
Spark Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 569, 570
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 569, 570
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568, 569, 570
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176, 177
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .174, 175, 178
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 376
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
612 INDEX
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 169
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 169
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .336
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347, 560
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .61
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 169
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC). . . . . . .338, 345
Tilt
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Tilt Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 169
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .423, 424
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 428, 434, 589
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 613
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481, 485, 490
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428, 434
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481, 484, 485
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423, 424
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439, 490
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417, 428
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434, 436, 482
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . .
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome .
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.437
.471
.437
.490
.417
.469
.150
.464
.499
.468
.476
.468
.476
.395
.410
.464
.476
.467
.470
10
614 INDEX
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538, 568, 571
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384, 536
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536, 568, 571
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 25
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 46
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158, 297
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .330
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 24, 330
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Siri Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 34
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . .36, 328
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 328
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 615
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .334
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424, 461, 463
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347, 560
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .287
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 525
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 246
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164, 165
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
616 INDEX
Windshield Wiper Blades .
Windshield Wipers . . . . .
Wiper Blade Replacement
Wipers, Intermittent . . . .
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.525
.164
.525
.164
.166
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
16C481-126-AB
16UF-126-AA
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
First Edition
Second
Printed in U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement